questions

28
KERNEL UPGRADE: Set system message using sm02 to inform users about downtime. Download the kernel patches from the service market place. Service Market Place -> Download->My companys Application compoenets ->

Transcript of questions

Page 1: questions

KERNEL UPGRADE

Set system message using sm02 to inform users about downtime

Download the kernel patches from the service market placeService Market Place -gt Download-gtMy companys Application compoenets -gt

Select SAP KERNEL 64 bit (as our server is 64 IA server and installation in Non Unicode)

Download both Database independent and DB dependent Oracle (as our DB is oracle) parts of the kernel

As we are going to upgrade to kernel patch level 201 of SAP kernel 700 please select that and add to download basket Similarly add Oracle(DB dependent) part for Kernel patch level 201 also to download basket

Start SAP download manager on ur desktop or the remote server and enter your service market credentials it will connect to your download basket and show the contents that you added in the above steps as ready to be downloaded Please start download

Now transfer the two SAR files on to the server where you want the Kernel upgrade to be performed Using FTP or WinSCP tool

We are performing kernel upgrade on Q23 system on server er3as102 I have used winscp tool to transfer the SAR files to the folder sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201

Your kernel resides at the path sapmntQ23exe folder keep a backup of the current kernel before you apply the patch In case if the kernel upgrade fails you will have your old kernel to revert back to

Backing up your present Kernel as exe_old bull Connect to the server er3as102 using puttyxmanager with your Signum Id ( if you dont have access take your

colleagues ) ) bull Give newid sidadm ( here q23adm) to switch user to sap admin user

bull Now Cd to the sapmntQ23 directory

bullbull now copy the contents of exe to a new folder exe_old Using cp -R exe exe_old It will take some time and after

its finished you will see a new folder when you do ls -l in sapmntQ23 directory

bull

Now we are done with the prerequisites of the kernel upgrade activity The patch level of Q23 system is as below

Shutdown the Q23 sap system at the mentioned downtime using stopsap command

Once you are sure SAP is shutdown Cd sapmntQ23 SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXE_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB independent part of the kernel PL 201 to exe folder

SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXEDB_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB dependent oracle specific files to exe folder

Once this is done start the SAP system Q23 by issuing the startsap command

Troubleshoot the errors if you face any if nothing works out replace the exe_old back to exe and bring the system up before the downtime finishes

1 What are the issues relate to transport if transport has been fired and not able to importAns Issue related to Transport is following

1 RFC connection issues2 Trans dir Is full3 Tr is inconsistent4 No correct authorization5 Transport request is after the end mark in the Import Queue

2 What is SAPRouter and how to setup And How SAP People login to the systemAns SAProuter is an SAP program that acts as an intermediate station (proxy) in a network connection between SAP Systems or between SAP Systems and external networks In short SAProuter provides you with the means of controlling access to your SAP system

3 All T-codes for monitoring and their detailsAns SM21 -- Job SNC_APP_STOCK_TRANSFER_2480ST02 -- OKSM66SM50 -- OKSM13 -- OkUpdate is active SM12 --- No old locksST22 --- Record total number of short dumps from yesterday and investigate recurring short dumps 10 dumpsST03N --- Record Average Dialog Response day for previous day 13102010--11825SMQ2 -- okSMQS -- okSM58 -- OKDatabase CheckDB12 Backup completed successfully-11102010 190015DB02 9586 usedST04 9875SP01 ndash Spool jobAL08 ndash Active usersSM50 ndash Work ProcessSM51 - SM37ST22SM21ST02SM12SM13SM58DB12DB02ST04Checking Dialog usersAL08 - no of active users 6No of Dialog processes in Waiting state 22

Background Job statusNumber of batch process in Waiting State free 22Number of Active jobs 6

SAP Memory (Current use )Roll area 041Page area 002

Extended memory 918Heap memory

CPU Utlilization ()CPU utilization of DB Server Utilization user 72 system 28 idle 0 io wait 0CPU utilization of App Server NA

4 For SPAM (Support pack) where we can find the log file at OS levelAns Usrsaptranslogslog5 What may be the possible reason if background job is keeping running for very long time and how to resolve Ans ndash 1 Background work process already busy in other job and no free work processes 2 If job is updating something in DB and update work process is busy 3 in case of after event or after job the event is not trigger so job will not start 4 ABAP program starts a loop 5 Authorization issues 6 How many request generates when we do the client export and importAns When the export is finished and depending on the chosen copy profile you get the followingtransport requests1048707 TT1KOnnnnnn (cross-client objects)1048707 TT1KXnnnnnn (client-dependent long texts)1048707 TT1KTnnnnnn (client-dependent tables)where TT1 is the SID and ltnnnnnngt is a system-generated transport number

7 How to schedule the ABAP program as background jobAns T-Code ndash SM36Enter Job name and Job class click on job stepsThere we can find the option for ABAP programs external commands and external programsIn start condition button we can define all the start conditions ndash Immediate date time after event after job and at operation modes

8 Which one you will prefer-- remote client copy or client export and whyAns Client Export is better than remote client copy ndash 1 If there is no LAN connection2 The data is to be buffered3 A client transport differs from a client copy in that it does not use RFC Like a client copy however a client transport is used to copy data between different clients A client transport can be used to replace a local or remote client copy4 A client transport consists of two steps First a client export extracts client data from the source client to files at the operating system level Then the data is imported from the operating system files into the target clientTADM ndash 12_2_62 ndash page ndash 388

9 Roles and responsibilitiesAns- my Roles and responsibilities contains1 Day to day monitoring to the system and reporting to the management2 Monitoring the work process and their status time to time3 Maintaining RFC connection bw different SAP systems4 Background Job management like ndash Monitoring and scheduling the job5 Transport related work6 Client management like- Client creation and client copy7 Kernel Upgrade8 Roles and profiles9 Work related to SMP like- Register developer and object in marketplace to get access keys Check OSS and HTTP connection and open that according to the requirement Maintain the S-user id in SMP and download the kernel and patch files10 In Solution manager we use to create the project and keep all the demand numbers in that to track all the development related to that project that is happening in dev system

10 What are roles and profiles and how to create and assign to a userAns 11 How to enable the trace and how to use thatAns For enabling the trace we use ST01 ndash

The following components can be monitored using the SAP system tracebull Authorization checksbull Kernel functionsbull Kernel module

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 2: questions

Select SAP KERNEL 64 bit (as our server is 64 IA server and installation in Non Unicode)

Download both Database independent and DB dependent Oracle (as our DB is oracle) parts of the kernel

As we are going to upgrade to kernel patch level 201 of SAP kernel 700 please select that and add to download basket Similarly add Oracle(DB dependent) part for Kernel patch level 201 also to download basket

Start SAP download manager on ur desktop or the remote server and enter your service market credentials it will connect to your download basket and show the contents that you added in the above steps as ready to be downloaded Please start download

Now transfer the two SAR files on to the server where you want the Kernel upgrade to be performed Using FTP or WinSCP tool

We are performing kernel upgrade on Q23 system on server er3as102 I have used winscp tool to transfer the SAR files to the folder sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201

Your kernel resides at the path sapmntQ23exe folder keep a backup of the current kernel before you apply the patch In case if the kernel upgrade fails you will have your old kernel to revert back to

Backing up your present Kernel as exe_old bull Connect to the server er3as102 using puttyxmanager with your Signum Id ( if you dont have access take your

colleagues ) ) bull Give newid sidadm ( here q23adm) to switch user to sap admin user

bull Now Cd to the sapmntQ23 directory

bullbull now copy the contents of exe to a new folder exe_old Using cp -R exe exe_old It will take some time and after

its finished you will see a new folder when you do ls -l in sapmntQ23 directory

bull

Now we are done with the prerequisites of the kernel upgrade activity The patch level of Q23 system is as below

Shutdown the Q23 sap system at the mentioned downtime using stopsap command

Once you are sure SAP is shutdown Cd sapmntQ23 SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXE_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB independent part of the kernel PL 201 to exe folder

SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXEDB_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB dependent oracle specific files to exe folder

Once this is done start the SAP system Q23 by issuing the startsap command

Troubleshoot the errors if you face any if nothing works out replace the exe_old back to exe and bring the system up before the downtime finishes

1 What are the issues relate to transport if transport has been fired and not able to importAns Issue related to Transport is following

1 RFC connection issues2 Trans dir Is full3 Tr is inconsistent4 No correct authorization5 Transport request is after the end mark in the Import Queue

2 What is SAPRouter and how to setup And How SAP People login to the systemAns SAProuter is an SAP program that acts as an intermediate station (proxy) in a network connection between SAP Systems or between SAP Systems and external networks In short SAProuter provides you with the means of controlling access to your SAP system

3 All T-codes for monitoring and their detailsAns SM21 -- Job SNC_APP_STOCK_TRANSFER_2480ST02 -- OKSM66SM50 -- OKSM13 -- OkUpdate is active SM12 --- No old locksST22 --- Record total number of short dumps from yesterday and investigate recurring short dumps 10 dumpsST03N --- Record Average Dialog Response day for previous day 13102010--11825SMQ2 -- okSMQS -- okSM58 -- OKDatabase CheckDB12 Backup completed successfully-11102010 190015DB02 9586 usedST04 9875SP01 ndash Spool jobAL08 ndash Active usersSM50 ndash Work ProcessSM51 - SM37ST22SM21ST02SM12SM13SM58DB12DB02ST04Checking Dialog usersAL08 - no of active users 6No of Dialog processes in Waiting state 22

Background Job statusNumber of batch process in Waiting State free 22Number of Active jobs 6

SAP Memory (Current use )Roll area 041Page area 002

Extended memory 918Heap memory

CPU Utlilization ()CPU utilization of DB Server Utilization user 72 system 28 idle 0 io wait 0CPU utilization of App Server NA

4 For SPAM (Support pack) where we can find the log file at OS levelAns Usrsaptranslogslog5 What may be the possible reason if background job is keeping running for very long time and how to resolve Ans ndash 1 Background work process already busy in other job and no free work processes 2 If job is updating something in DB and update work process is busy 3 in case of after event or after job the event is not trigger so job will not start 4 ABAP program starts a loop 5 Authorization issues 6 How many request generates when we do the client export and importAns When the export is finished and depending on the chosen copy profile you get the followingtransport requests1048707 TT1KOnnnnnn (cross-client objects)1048707 TT1KXnnnnnn (client-dependent long texts)1048707 TT1KTnnnnnn (client-dependent tables)where TT1 is the SID and ltnnnnnngt is a system-generated transport number

7 How to schedule the ABAP program as background jobAns T-Code ndash SM36Enter Job name and Job class click on job stepsThere we can find the option for ABAP programs external commands and external programsIn start condition button we can define all the start conditions ndash Immediate date time after event after job and at operation modes

8 Which one you will prefer-- remote client copy or client export and whyAns Client Export is better than remote client copy ndash 1 If there is no LAN connection2 The data is to be buffered3 A client transport differs from a client copy in that it does not use RFC Like a client copy however a client transport is used to copy data between different clients A client transport can be used to replace a local or remote client copy4 A client transport consists of two steps First a client export extracts client data from the source client to files at the operating system level Then the data is imported from the operating system files into the target clientTADM ndash 12_2_62 ndash page ndash 388

9 Roles and responsibilitiesAns- my Roles and responsibilities contains1 Day to day monitoring to the system and reporting to the management2 Monitoring the work process and their status time to time3 Maintaining RFC connection bw different SAP systems4 Background Job management like ndash Monitoring and scheduling the job5 Transport related work6 Client management like- Client creation and client copy7 Kernel Upgrade8 Roles and profiles9 Work related to SMP like- Register developer and object in marketplace to get access keys Check OSS and HTTP connection and open that according to the requirement Maintain the S-user id in SMP and download the kernel and patch files10 In Solution manager we use to create the project and keep all the demand numbers in that to track all the development related to that project that is happening in dev system

10 What are roles and profiles and how to create and assign to a userAns 11 How to enable the trace and how to use thatAns For enabling the trace we use ST01 ndash

The following components can be monitored using the SAP system tracebull Authorization checksbull Kernel functionsbull Kernel module

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 3: questions

Download both Database independent and DB dependent Oracle (as our DB is oracle) parts of the kernel

As we are going to upgrade to kernel patch level 201 of SAP kernel 700 please select that and add to download basket Similarly add Oracle(DB dependent) part for Kernel patch level 201 also to download basket

Start SAP download manager on ur desktop or the remote server and enter your service market credentials it will connect to your download basket and show the contents that you added in the above steps as ready to be downloaded Please start download

Now transfer the two SAR files on to the server where you want the Kernel upgrade to be performed Using FTP or WinSCP tool

We are performing kernel upgrade on Q23 system on server er3as102 I have used winscp tool to transfer the SAR files to the folder sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201

Your kernel resides at the path sapmntQ23exe folder keep a backup of the current kernel before you apply the patch In case if the kernel upgrade fails you will have your old kernel to revert back to

Backing up your present Kernel as exe_old bull Connect to the server er3as102 using puttyxmanager with your Signum Id ( if you dont have access take your

colleagues ) ) bull Give newid sidadm ( here q23adm) to switch user to sap admin user

bull Now Cd to the sapmntQ23 directory

bullbull now copy the contents of exe to a new folder exe_old Using cp -R exe exe_old It will take some time and after

its finished you will see a new folder when you do ls -l in sapmntQ23 directory

bull

Now we are done with the prerequisites of the kernel upgrade activity The patch level of Q23 system is as below

Shutdown the Q23 sap system at the mentioned downtime using stopsap command

Once you are sure SAP is shutdown Cd sapmntQ23 SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXE_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB independent part of the kernel PL 201 to exe folder

SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXEDB_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB dependent oracle specific files to exe folder

Once this is done start the SAP system Q23 by issuing the startsap command

Troubleshoot the errors if you face any if nothing works out replace the exe_old back to exe and bring the system up before the downtime finishes

1 What are the issues relate to transport if transport has been fired and not able to importAns Issue related to Transport is following

1 RFC connection issues2 Trans dir Is full3 Tr is inconsistent4 No correct authorization5 Transport request is after the end mark in the Import Queue

2 What is SAPRouter and how to setup And How SAP People login to the systemAns SAProuter is an SAP program that acts as an intermediate station (proxy) in a network connection between SAP Systems or between SAP Systems and external networks In short SAProuter provides you with the means of controlling access to your SAP system

3 All T-codes for monitoring and their detailsAns SM21 -- Job SNC_APP_STOCK_TRANSFER_2480ST02 -- OKSM66SM50 -- OKSM13 -- OkUpdate is active SM12 --- No old locksST22 --- Record total number of short dumps from yesterday and investigate recurring short dumps 10 dumpsST03N --- Record Average Dialog Response day for previous day 13102010--11825SMQ2 -- okSMQS -- okSM58 -- OKDatabase CheckDB12 Backup completed successfully-11102010 190015DB02 9586 usedST04 9875SP01 ndash Spool jobAL08 ndash Active usersSM50 ndash Work ProcessSM51 - SM37ST22SM21ST02SM12SM13SM58DB12DB02ST04Checking Dialog usersAL08 - no of active users 6No of Dialog processes in Waiting state 22

Background Job statusNumber of batch process in Waiting State free 22Number of Active jobs 6

SAP Memory (Current use )Roll area 041Page area 002

Extended memory 918Heap memory

CPU Utlilization ()CPU utilization of DB Server Utilization user 72 system 28 idle 0 io wait 0CPU utilization of App Server NA

4 For SPAM (Support pack) where we can find the log file at OS levelAns Usrsaptranslogslog5 What may be the possible reason if background job is keeping running for very long time and how to resolve Ans ndash 1 Background work process already busy in other job and no free work processes 2 If job is updating something in DB and update work process is busy 3 in case of after event or after job the event is not trigger so job will not start 4 ABAP program starts a loop 5 Authorization issues 6 How many request generates when we do the client export and importAns When the export is finished and depending on the chosen copy profile you get the followingtransport requests1048707 TT1KOnnnnnn (cross-client objects)1048707 TT1KXnnnnnn (client-dependent long texts)1048707 TT1KTnnnnnn (client-dependent tables)where TT1 is the SID and ltnnnnnngt is a system-generated transport number

7 How to schedule the ABAP program as background jobAns T-Code ndash SM36Enter Job name and Job class click on job stepsThere we can find the option for ABAP programs external commands and external programsIn start condition button we can define all the start conditions ndash Immediate date time after event after job and at operation modes

8 Which one you will prefer-- remote client copy or client export and whyAns Client Export is better than remote client copy ndash 1 If there is no LAN connection2 The data is to be buffered3 A client transport differs from a client copy in that it does not use RFC Like a client copy however a client transport is used to copy data between different clients A client transport can be used to replace a local or remote client copy4 A client transport consists of two steps First a client export extracts client data from the source client to files at the operating system level Then the data is imported from the operating system files into the target clientTADM ndash 12_2_62 ndash page ndash 388

9 Roles and responsibilitiesAns- my Roles and responsibilities contains1 Day to day monitoring to the system and reporting to the management2 Monitoring the work process and their status time to time3 Maintaining RFC connection bw different SAP systems4 Background Job management like ndash Monitoring and scheduling the job5 Transport related work6 Client management like- Client creation and client copy7 Kernel Upgrade8 Roles and profiles9 Work related to SMP like- Register developer and object in marketplace to get access keys Check OSS and HTTP connection and open that according to the requirement Maintain the S-user id in SMP and download the kernel and patch files10 In Solution manager we use to create the project and keep all the demand numbers in that to track all the development related to that project that is happening in dev system

10 What are roles and profiles and how to create and assign to a userAns 11 How to enable the trace and how to use thatAns For enabling the trace we use ST01 ndash

The following components can be monitored using the SAP system tracebull Authorization checksbull Kernel functionsbull Kernel module

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 4: questions

Start SAP download manager on ur desktop or the remote server and enter your service market credentials it will connect to your download basket and show the contents that you added in the above steps as ready to be downloaded Please start download

Now transfer the two SAR files on to the server where you want the Kernel upgrade to be performed Using FTP or WinSCP tool

We are performing kernel upgrade on Q23 system on server er3as102 I have used winscp tool to transfer the SAR files to the folder sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201

Your kernel resides at the path sapmntQ23exe folder keep a backup of the current kernel before you apply the patch In case if the kernel upgrade fails you will have your old kernel to revert back to

Backing up your present Kernel as exe_old bull Connect to the server er3as102 using puttyxmanager with your Signum Id ( if you dont have access take your

colleagues ) ) bull Give newid sidadm ( here q23adm) to switch user to sap admin user

bull Now Cd to the sapmntQ23 directory

bullbull now copy the contents of exe to a new folder exe_old Using cp -R exe exe_old It will take some time and after

its finished you will see a new folder when you do ls -l in sapmntQ23 directory

bull

Now we are done with the prerequisites of the kernel upgrade activity The patch level of Q23 system is as below

Shutdown the Q23 sap system at the mentioned downtime using stopsap command

Once you are sure SAP is shutdown Cd sapmntQ23 SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXE_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB independent part of the kernel PL 201 to exe folder

SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXEDB_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB dependent oracle specific files to exe folder

Once this is done start the SAP system Q23 by issuing the startsap command

Troubleshoot the errors if you face any if nothing works out replace the exe_old back to exe and bring the system up before the downtime finishes

1 What are the issues relate to transport if transport has been fired and not able to importAns Issue related to Transport is following

1 RFC connection issues2 Trans dir Is full3 Tr is inconsistent4 No correct authorization5 Transport request is after the end mark in the Import Queue

2 What is SAPRouter and how to setup And How SAP People login to the systemAns SAProuter is an SAP program that acts as an intermediate station (proxy) in a network connection between SAP Systems or between SAP Systems and external networks In short SAProuter provides you with the means of controlling access to your SAP system

3 All T-codes for monitoring and their detailsAns SM21 -- Job SNC_APP_STOCK_TRANSFER_2480ST02 -- OKSM66SM50 -- OKSM13 -- OkUpdate is active SM12 --- No old locksST22 --- Record total number of short dumps from yesterday and investigate recurring short dumps 10 dumpsST03N --- Record Average Dialog Response day for previous day 13102010--11825SMQ2 -- okSMQS -- okSM58 -- OKDatabase CheckDB12 Backup completed successfully-11102010 190015DB02 9586 usedST04 9875SP01 ndash Spool jobAL08 ndash Active usersSM50 ndash Work ProcessSM51 - SM37ST22SM21ST02SM12SM13SM58DB12DB02ST04Checking Dialog usersAL08 - no of active users 6No of Dialog processes in Waiting state 22

Background Job statusNumber of batch process in Waiting State free 22Number of Active jobs 6

SAP Memory (Current use )Roll area 041Page area 002

Extended memory 918Heap memory

CPU Utlilization ()CPU utilization of DB Server Utilization user 72 system 28 idle 0 io wait 0CPU utilization of App Server NA

4 For SPAM (Support pack) where we can find the log file at OS levelAns Usrsaptranslogslog5 What may be the possible reason if background job is keeping running for very long time and how to resolve Ans ndash 1 Background work process already busy in other job and no free work processes 2 If job is updating something in DB and update work process is busy 3 in case of after event or after job the event is not trigger so job will not start 4 ABAP program starts a loop 5 Authorization issues 6 How many request generates when we do the client export and importAns When the export is finished and depending on the chosen copy profile you get the followingtransport requests1048707 TT1KOnnnnnn (cross-client objects)1048707 TT1KXnnnnnn (client-dependent long texts)1048707 TT1KTnnnnnn (client-dependent tables)where TT1 is the SID and ltnnnnnngt is a system-generated transport number

7 How to schedule the ABAP program as background jobAns T-Code ndash SM36Enter Job name and Job class click on job stepsThere we can find the option for ABAP programs external commands and external programsIn start condition button we can define all the start conditions ndash Immediate date time after event after job and at operation modes

8 Which one you will prefer-- remote client copy or client export and whyAns Client Export is better than remote client copy ndash 1 If there is no LAN connection2 The data is to be buffered3 A client transport differs from a client copy in that it does not use RFC Like a client copy however a client transport is used to copy data between different clients A client transport can be used to replace a local or remote client copy4 A client transport consists of two steps First a client export extracts client data from the source client to files at the operating system level Then the data is imported from the operating system files into the target clientTADM ndash 12_2_62 ndash page ndash 388

9 Roles and responsibilitiesAns- my Roles and responsibilities contains1 Day to day monitoring to the system and reporting to the management2 Monitoring the work process and their status time to time3 Maintaining RFC connection bw different SAP systems4 Background Job management like ndash Monitoring and scheduling the job5 Transport related work6 Client management like- Client creation and client copy7 Kernel Upgrade8 Roles and profiles9 Work related to SMP like- Register developer and object in marketplace to get access keys Check OSS and HTTP connection and open that according to the requirement Maintain the S-user id in SMP and download the kernel and patch files10 In Solution manager we use to create the project and keep all the demand numbers in that to track all the development related to that project that is happening in dev system

10 What are roles and profiles and how to create and assign to a userAns 11 How to enable the trace and how to use thatAns For enabling the trace we use ST01 ndash

The following components can be monitored using the SAP system tracebull Authorization checksbull Kernel functionsbull Kernel module

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 5: questions

bull Now Cd to the sapmntQ23 directory

bullbull now copy the contents of exe to a new folder exe_old Using cp -R exe exe_old It will take some time and after

its finished you will see a new folder when you do ls -l in sapmntQ23 directory

bull

Now we are done with the prerequisites of the kernel upgrade activity The patch level of Q23 system is as below

Shutdown the Q23 sap system at the mentioned downtime using stopsap command

Once you are sure SAP is shutdown Cd sapmntQ23 SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXE_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB independent part of the kernel PL 201 to exe folder

SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXEDB_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB dependent oracle specific files to exe folder

Once this is done start the SAP system Q23 by issuing the startsap command

Troubleshoot the errors if you face any if nothing works out replace the exe_old back to exe and bring the system up before the downtime finishes

1 What are the issues relate to transport if transport has been fired and not able to importAns Issue related to Transport is following

1 RFC connection issues2 Trans dir Is full3 Tr is inconsistent4 No correct authorization5 Transport request is after the end mark in the Import Queue

2 What is SAPRouter and how to setup And How SAP People login to the systemAns SAProuter is an SAP program that acts as an intermediate station (proxy) in a network connection between SAP Systems or between SAP Systems and external networks In short SAProuter provides you with the means of controlling access to your SAP system

3 All T-codes for monitoring and their detailsAns SM21 -- Job SNC_APP_STOCK_TRANSFER_2480ST02 -- OKSM66SM50 -- OKSM13 -- OkUpdate is active SM12 --- No old locksST22 --- Record total number of short dumps from yesterday and investigate recurring short dumps 10 dumpsST03N --- Record Average Dialog Response day for previous day 13102010--11825SMQ2 -- okSMQS -- okSM58 -- OKDatabase CheckDB12 Backup completed successfully-11102010 190015DB02 9586 usedST04 9875SP01 ndash Spool jobAL08 ndash Active usersSM50 ndash Work ProcessSM51 - SM37ST22SM21ST02SM12SM13SM58DB12DB02ST04Checking Dialog usersAL08 - no of active users 6No of Dialog processes in Waiting state 22

Background Job statusNumber of batch process in Waiting State free 22Number of Active jobs 6

SAP Memory (Current use )Roll area 041Page area 002

Extended memory 918Heap memory

CPU Utlilization ()CPU utilization of DB Server Utilization user 72 system 28 idle 0 io wait 0CPU utilization of App Server NA

4 For SPAM (Support pack) where we can find the log file at OS levelAns Usrsaptranslogslog5 What may be the possible reason if background job is keeping running for very long time and how to resolve Ans ndash 1 Background work process already busy in other job and no free work processes 2 If job is updating something in DB and update work process is busy 3 in case of after event or after job the event is not trigger so job will not start 4 ABAP program starts a loop 5 Authorization issues 6 How many request generates when we do the client export and importAns When the export is finished and depending on the chosen copy profile you get the followingtransport requests1048707 TT1KOnnnnnn (cross-client objects)1048707 TT1KXnnnnnn (client-dependent long texts)1048707 TT1KTnnnnnn (client-dependent tables)where TT1 is the SID and ltnnnnnngt is a system-generated transport number

7 How to schedule the ABAP program as background jobAns T-Code ndash SM36Enter Job name and Job class click on job stepsThere we can find the option for ABAP programs external commands and external programsIn start condition button we can define all the start conditions ndash Immediate date time after event after job and at operation modes

8 Which one you will prefer-- remote client copy or client export and whyAns Client Export is better than remote client copy ndash 1 If there is no LAN connection2 The data is to be buffered3 A client transport differs from a client copy in that it does not use RFC Like a client copy however a client transport is used to copy data between different clients A client transport can be used to replace a local or remote client copy4 A client transport consists of two steps First a client export extracts client data from the source client to files at the operating system level Then the data is imported from the operating system files into the target clientTADM ndash 12_2_62 ndash page ndash 388

9 Roles and responsibilitiesAns- my Roles and responsibilities contains1 Day to day monitoring to the system and reporting to the management2 Monitoring the work process and their status time to time3 Maintaining RFC connection bw different SAP systems4 Background Job management like ndash Monitoring and scheduling the job5 Transport related work6 Client management like- Client creation and client copy7 Kernel Upgrade8 Roles and profiles9 Work related to SMP like- Register developer and object in marketplace to get access keys Check OSS and HTTP connection and open that according to the requirement Maintain the S-user id in SMP and download the kernel and patch files10 In Solution manager we use to create the project and keep all the demand numbers in that to track all the development related to that project that is happening in dev system

10 What are roles and profiles and how to create and assign to a userAns 11 How to enable the trace and how to use thatAns For enabling the trace we use ST01 ndash

The following components can be monitored using the SAP system tracebull Authorization checksbull Kernel functionsbull Kernel module

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 6: questions

Shutdown the Q23 sap system at the mentioned downtime using stopsap command

Once you are sure SAP is shutdown Cd sapmntQ23 SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXE_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB independent part of the kernel PL 201 to exe folder

SAPCAR -xvf sapcd2GRCSANJEEVSAPKernelPL201SAPEXEDB_201-20001205SAR -R sapmntQ23exe

this will extractunzip the DB dependent oracle specific files to exe folder

Once this is done start the SAP system Q23 by issuing the startsap command

Troubleshoot the errors if you face any if nothing works out replace the exe_old back to exe and bring the system up before the downtime finishes

1 What are the issues relate to transport if transport has been fired and not able to importAns Issue related to Transport is following

1 RFC connection issues2 Trans dir Is full3 Tr is inconsistent4 No correct authorization5 Transport request is after the end mark in the Import Queue

2 What is SAPRouter and how to setup And How SAP People login to the systemAns SAProuter is an SAP program that acts as an intermediate station (proxy) in a network connection between SAP Systems or between SAP Systems and external networks In short SAProuter provides you with the means of controlling access to your SAP system

3 All T-codes for monitoring and their detailsAns SM21 -- Job SNC_APP_STOCK_TRANSFER_2480ST02 -- OKSM66SM50 -- OKSM13 -- OkUpdate is active SM12 --- No old locksST22 --- Record total number of short dumps from yesterday and investigate recurring short dumps 10 dumpsST03N --- Record Average Dialog Response day for previous day 13102010--11825SMQ2 -- okSMQS -- okSM58 -- OKDatabase CheckDB12 Backup completed successfully-11102010 190015DB02 9586 usedST04 9875SP01 ndash Spool jobAL08 ndash Active usersSM50 ndash Work ProcessSM51 - SM37ST22SM21ST02SM12SM13SM58DB12DB02ST04Checking Dialog usersAL08 - no of active users 6No of Dialog processes in Waiting state 22

Background Job statusNumber of batch process in Waiting State free 22Number of Active jobs 6

SAP Memory (Current use )Roll area 041Page area 002

Extended memory 918Heap memory

CPU Utlilization ()CPU utilization of DB Server Utilization user 72 system 28 idle 0 io wait 0CPU utilization of App Server NA

4 For SPAM (Support pack) where we can find the log file at OS levelAns Usrsaptranslogslog5 What may be the possible reason if background job is keeping running for very long time and how to resolve Ans ndash 1 Background work process already busy in other job and no free work processes 2 If job is updating something in DB and update work process is busy 3 in case of after event or after job the event is not trigger so job will not start 4 ABAP program starts a loop 5 Authorization issues 6 How many request generates when we do the client export and importAns When the export is finished and depending on the chosen copy profile you get the followingtransport requests1048707 TT1KOnnnnnn (cross-client objects)1048707 TT1KXnnnnnn (client-dependent long texts)1048707 TT1KTnnnnnn (client-dependent tables)where TT1 is the SID and ltnnnnnngt is a system-generated transport number

7 How to schedule the ABAP program as background jobAns T-Code ndash SM36Enter Job name and Job class click on job stepsThere we can find the option for ABAP programs external commands and external programsIn start condition button we can define all the start conditions ndash Immediate date time after event after job and at operation modes

8 Which one you will prefer-- remote client copy or client export and whyAns Client Export is better than remote client copy ndash 1 If there is no LAN connection2 The data is to be buffered3 A client transport differs from a client copy in that it does not use RFC Like a client copy however a client transport is used to copy data between different clients A client transport can be used to replace a local or remote client copy4 A client transport consists of two steps First a client export extracts client data from the source client to files at the operating system level Then the data is imported from the operating system files into the target clientTADM ndash 12_2_62 ndash page ndash 388

9 Roles and responsibilitiesAns- my Roles and responsibilities contains1 Day to day monitoring to the system and reporting to the management2 Monitoring the work process and their status time to time3 Maintaining RFC connection bw different SAP systems4 Background Job management like ndash Monitoring and scheduling the job5 Transport related work6 Client management like- Client creation and client copy7 Kernel Upgrade8 Roles and profiles9 Work related to SMP like- Register developer and object in marketplace to get access keys Check OSS and HTTP connection and open that according to the requirement Maintain the S-user id in SMP and download the kernel and patch files10 In Solution manager we use to create the project and keep all the demand numbers in that to track all the development related to that project that is happening in dev system

10 What are roles and profiles and how to create and assign to a userAns 11 How to enable the trace and how to use thatAns For enabling the trace we use ST01 ndash

The following components can be monitored using the SAP system tracebull Authorization checksbull Kernel functionsbull Kernel module

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 7: questions

3 All T-codes for monitoring and their detailsAns SM21 -- Job SNC_APP_STOCK_TRANSFER_2480ST02 -- OKSM66SM50 -- OKSM13 -- OkUpdate is active SM12 --- No old locksST22 --- Record total number of short dumps from yesterday and investigate recurring short dumps 10 dumpsST03N --- Record Average Dialog Response day for previous day 13102010--11825SMQ2 -- okSMQS -- okSM58 -- OKDatabase CheckDB12 Backup completed successfully-11102010 190015DB02 9586 usedST04 9875SP01 ndash Spool jobAL08 ndash Active usersSM50 ndash Work ProcessSM51 - SM37ST22SM21ST02SM12SM13SM58DB12DB02ST04Checking Dialog usersAL08 - no of active users 6No of Dialog processes in Waiting state 22

Background Job statusNumber of batch process in Waiting State free 22Number of Active jobs 6

SAP Memory (Current use )Roll area 041Page area 002

Extended memory 918Heap memory

CPU Utlilization ()CPU utilization of DB Server Utilization user 72 system 28 idle 0 io wait 0CPU utilization of App Server NA

4 For SPAM (Support pack) where we can find the log file at OS levelAns Usrsaptranslogslog5 What may be the possible reason if background job is keeping running for very long time and how to resolve Ans ndash 1 Background work process already busy in other job and no free work processes 2 If job is updating something in DB and update work process is busy 3 in case of after event or after job the event is not trigger so job will not start 4 ABAP program starts a loop 5 Authorization issues 6 How many request generates when we do the client export and importAns When the export is finished and depending on the chosen copy profile you get the followingtransport requests1048707 TT1KOnnnnnn (cross-client objects)1048707 TT1KXnnnnnn (client-dependent long texts)1048707 TT1KTnnnnnn (client-dependent tables)where TT1 is the SID and ltnnnnnngt is a system-generated transport number

7 How to schedule the ABAP program as background jobAns T-Code ndash SM36Enter Job name and Job class click on job stepsThere we can find the option for ABAP programs external commands and external programsIn start condition button we can define all the start conditions ndash Immediate date time after event after job and at operation modes

8 Which one you will prefer-- remote client copy or client export and whyAns Client Export is better than remote client copy ndash 1 If there is no LAN connection2 The data is to be buffered3 A client transport differs from a client copy in that it does not use RFC Like a client copy however a client transport is used to copy data between different clients A client transport can be used to replace a local or remote client copy4 A client transport consists of two steps First a client export extracts client data from the source client to files at the operating system level Then the data is imported from the operating system files into the target clientTADM ndash 12_2_62 ndash page ndash 388

9 Roles and responsibilitiesAns- my Roles and responsibilities contains1 Day to day monitoring to the system and reporting to the management2 Monitoring the work process and their status time to time3 Maintaining RFC connection bw different SAP systems4 Background Job management like ndash Monitoring and scheduling the job5 Transport related work6 Client management like- Client creation and client copy7 Kernel Upgrade8 Roles and profiles9 Work related to SMP like- Register developer and object in marketplace to get access keys Check OSS and HTTP connection and open that according to the requirement Maintain the S-user id in SMP and download the kernel and patch files10 In Solution manager we use to create the project and keep all the demand numbers in that to track all the development related to that project that is happening in dev system

10 What are roles and profiles and how to create and assign to a userAns 11 How to enable the trace and how to use thatAns For enabling the trace we use ST01 ndash

The following components can be monitored using the SAP system tracebull Authorization checksbull Kernel functionsbull Kernel module

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 8: questions

Extended memory 918Heap memory

CPU Utlilization ()CPU utilization of DB Server Utilization user 72 system 28 idle 0 io wait 0CPU utilization of App Server NA

4 For SPAM (Support pack) where we can find the log file at OS levelAns Usrsaptranslogslog5 What may be the possible reason if background job is keeping running for very long time and how to resolve Ans ndash 1 Background work process already busy in other job and no free work processes 2 If job is updating something in DB and update work process is busy 3 in case of after event or after job the event is not trigger so job will not start 4 ABAP program starts a loop 5 Authorization issues 6 How many request generates when we do the client export and importAns When the export is finished and depending on the chosen copy profile you get the followingtransport requests1048707 TT1KOnnnnnn (cross-client objects)1048707 TT1KXnnnnnn (client-dependent long texts)1048707 TT1KTnnnnnn (client-dependent tables)where TT1 is the SID and ltnnnnnngt is a system-generated transport number

7 How to schedule the ABAP program as background jobAns T-Code ndash SM36Enter Job name and Job class click on job stepsThere we can find the option for ABAP programs external commands and external programsIn start condition button we can define all the start conditions ndash Immediate date time after event after job and at operation modes

8 Which one you will prefer-- remote client copy or client export and whyAns Client Export is better than remote client copy ndash 1 If there is no LAN connection2 The data is to be buffered3 A client transport differs from a client copy in that it does not use RFC Like a client copy however a client transport is used to copy data between different clients A client transport can be used to replace a local or remote client copy4 A client transport consists of two steps First a client export extracts client data from the source client to files at the operating system level Then the data is imported from the operating system files into the target clientTADM ndash 12_2_62 ndash page ndash 388

9 Roles and responsibilitiesAns- my Roles and responsibilities contains1 Day to day monitoring to the system and reporting to the management2 Monitoring the work process and their status time to time3 Maintaining RFC connection bw different SAP systems4 Background Job management like ndash Monitoring and scheduling the job5 Transport related work6 Client management like- Client creation and client copy7 Kernel Upgrade8 Roles and profiles9 Work related to SMP like- Register developer and object in marketplace to get access keys Check OSS and HTTP connection and open that according to the requirement Maintain the S-user id in SMP and download the kernel and patch files10 In Solution manager we use to create the project and keep all the demand numbers in that to track all the development related to that project that is happening in dev system

10 What are roles and profiles and how to create and assign to a userAns 11 How to enable the trace and how to use thatAns For enabling the trace we use ST01 ndash

The following components can be monitored using the SAP system tracebull Authorization checksbull Kernel functionsbull Kernel module

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 9: questions

9 Roles and responsibilitiesAns- my Roles and responsibilities contains1 Day to day monitoring to the system and reporting to the management2 Monitoring the work process and their status time to time3 Maintaining RFC connection bw different SAP systems4 Background Job management like ndash Monitoring and scheduling the job5 Transport related work6 Client management like- Client creation and client copy7 Kernel Upgrade8 Roles and profiles9 Work related to SMP like- Register developer and object in marketplace to get access keys Check OSS and HTTP connection and open that according to the requirement Maintain the S-user id in SMP and download the kernel and patch files10 In Solution manager we use to create the project and keep all the demand numbers in that to track all the development related to that project that is happening in dev system

10 What are roles and profiles and how to create and assign to a userAns 11 How to enable the trace and how to use thatAns For enabling the trace we use ST01 ndash

The following components can be monitored using the SAP system tracebull Authorization checksbull Kernel functionsbull Kernel module

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 10: questions

bull Database accesses (SQL trace)bull Table buffersbull RFC callsbull Lock operations (client side)The last 4 components can also be monitored using Performance Analysis (transaction ST05)Performance Use ST05 ndash

12 How to check ABAP dump and how to analyze the issue Ans For this use the T-Code- SM22Details from notebook13 How to create transport Domain and configure transport describe in detailAns TADM14 How to add the system in SMPAns NA15 Performance check for SAP SystemAns ST0516 How to check that from how much time that work process is runningAns17 ST02 - What are the details u find and when you can tell that there may be a issue and how to resolveAns Try to have a look at OS response time ST06 look at CPU Memory Swap Disk and Lan response time Try to have a look at buffer quality ST02 if many fields are red investigate each fields dependant parameters Try to have a look at DB response time ST04N databuffer quality (SGA zone) how much physical reads logical reads Ratio wait times number of user calls Shared Pool cache hit ratio should be gt96 Sort usage Redo logging18 In SM50 what are the details you find and when you can tell that there may be an issue and how to resolveAns19 In AL08 what are the details u findAns20 In 3 profiles tell the sequence of that when SAP system getting upAns Notebook21 Descriptions of all the profiles and how to updateAns 22 in SPAM where we can get the log Ans USRSAPTransLog23 What is SWAP

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 11: questions

Ans Swapping is the process whereby a page of memory is copied to the preconfigured space on the hard disk called swap space to free up that page of memorySwapping is necessary for two important reasons First when the system requires more memory than is physically available the kernel swaps out less used pages and gives memory to the current application (process) that needs the memory immediately Second a significant number of the pages used by an application during its startup phase may only be used for initialization and then never used again The system can swap out those pages and free the memory for other applications or even for the disk cache24 What is the name of Kernel FileAns SAPEXE_201-xx and SAPEXEDB_201-xxx 25 How to do client copy have u access of sapAns yes26 Getting response from database very slow what will be the reasonAns27 Details of ST03Ans28 Details of ST02Ans29 How to provide access keysAns30 Kernel upgrades procedure in DetailAns In starting of this book31 How to apply Support pack in detailsAns32 Check the work process status at OS level in SapAns 33 What is the difference between SAP R3 and ECC Ans34 What does Sap_All and Sap_New Parameters define for a user who is granted with permissions Ans35 How to check cup utilization at UNIX levelAns36 How to check CPU utilization at SAP levelAns37 User is not able to login to the SAP systemAns38 SAP system is very slowAns39 Work process detail at UNIX levelAns40 What is transport layer and transport route and how to configureAns - A layer is the path to move the development objects and is always assigned to consolidation route A route defines the source and target system to move the objects and there are two routes--- 1 Consolidation route bet DEV and QAS 2 Delivery route bet QAS and PROif you build 3 systems ABC DEF and GHI unless you define route they wont be able to act as DEV QAS and PRD So route defines role of a system if you check the TMS configuration you will see 2 layers between the DEV and QAS SAP and ZADB SAP layer is for delivering SAP standard objects and ZADB is for delivering customized objects customized means ABAP developments standard means SAP default which SAP has provided and that is present alreadyLayer defines in which system developments will be madeRoute defines which system will act as what dev qas and prd

41 Whatrsquos the difference between R3trans and Tp in SAP-DBA

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 12: questions

Ans - R3trans is the r3 system transport program which can be used for transporting data between different sap systems even when they donrsquot belong to the same group R3trans normally is not used directly but called from the Tp control program or by the R3 upgrade Tp is the basic tool for the transporting the requestActually R3TRANS is used by TP (Both are SAP Kernel Programs) for anything to write from to to databaseR3 Trans also write transport logs in the DIR_TRANStmp directory which after the job is finished is moved to DIR_TRANSlog directory TP is the master controller program for all the jobs to be done by all the transport

42 What is the difference between support packages and kernel upgradeAns- Support package SAP delivers Support Packages to remove any errors that appear in important transactions Support Packages may contain language-dependent data such as message texts ABAP texts or screen texts Once you have used transaction SPAM to import a Support Package the translated texts for these objects are up-to-date for all languages in the system Kernel upgrade The SAP system consists in general terms of a kernel and applications The kernel is the central program that is Essential to the SAP system applications You can upgrade the kernel to a higher release while keeping the applications at the original release

43 How to install multiple Central Instances on the same physical machine Ans- A SAP system can contain one and only one Central Instance In the Central Instance you will have Message Server and Enque Work processor The Message Server should be only one per a single SAP system 44 What are the differences of a sap SID and host nameAns- SID is nothing but a name for an Instance Host is the system which hosts the InstanceLocal Installation Here we have both Database Instance [DB SID] and the Central Instance [SAP SID] in same system Ie Hostname is sameDomain Installation Here we have different hosts to hosts Database instance amp Central instance ie 2 hostsThe Host name is the name of the Computer where the instances (DatabaseSAP) are installed The SID refers to all the instances in a SAP system or a Database 45 Explain RMAN and how it can be used for database backup amp recoveryAns- RMAN IS THE recovery manager of oracle backups it will recover the backups and put them in the repository catalogue RMAN is used by the oracle only in SAP BR tools are used for the recovery of backups But these BR tools are also integrated with the RMAN only

46 Define the term ldquoGROWTH OF THE DATABASE and how should I find the growth of database in SAP R3Ans- Database Growth can be monitored from the T-Code DB02 Here you can find the growth of individual tablespaces also

47 When spool buffer is full and new spool request is raised what happens to the request Where does the request storedAns- The new spool request will be in the queue If it is urgent request then the current request will be stopped and new request will be send

48 What is spool bufferAns- Spool buffer is the memory space which is allocated in DB level or OS level where all the data are stored in that buffer area at the time giving prints In another point of view we can say that all printing datas goes through this buffer (memory) When it is created in DB level then its size is restricted Due to this there is a chance to fill up buffer area 49 Where can we find the 4 files (saplogonini sapmsgini saprouteini sapdoccdini) of GUI at OS level (I mean in which directory)Ans-

50 Can SAP Patches be installed when other users are onlineAns- SAP Support Packs should never be applied while users currently in the system as the new object are being imported in to the system You will encounter lot of should dumps in the system due to objects being generated and

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 13: questions

buffers getting refreshed No During patch implementation the patch manager updates some tables and programs If any user use that programmed or table it canrsquot update those table or program So it is better to apply patches when there is no user logged in the SAP system You better donrsquot do that because there will be a inconsistency if the same objects are used by any user who is online and thus the system throws a lot of short dumps

51 Which R3 System user is used for starting external programs using SAP background jobsAns- The user type is CPIC

52 Name the R3 System transaction used for monitoring a spool requests Ans- Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36 Spool monitoring is done by T-Code sp01Spool process is used for printing purpose for example printing pay slips printing invoices printing purchase order etc Most of the spool requests are scheduled in back ground jobs because they are time consuming or expensive jobs BTC jobs are scheduled in T-Code sm36

53 What is the difference between transport layer and development class

Ans- Firstly a Development Class is just like a package which holds a group of objects together Transport Layer just specifies the route through which these Development Classs objects has to move to the Consolidation system from Integration system

54 How to schedule background jobs at OS levelAns- For data base back up generally client use different third party software like Tivoli by IBM Schedule task by Microsoft Crontab by UNIX

55 Tell the architecture detail of SAP Ans56 How is database connected to the SAP system means how SAP communicates to the SAP systemAns57 What is gateway server and message server different system like XI and BI will be take request through Gateway serverAns58 What are the Start Default and Instance profile and what are the details mentioned in the Default profile Ans59 Detail of work process architecture Ans60 What is SPAM and SAINT and How to install support packAns61 What is TMS how to configure and transport domain and transport route definition and detailAns62 Suppose there are 2 users and they are not able to do one transaction So How to analyze missing authorization and how to assign that to userAns63 What are diff bw remote client copy and client export and import in which scenario we need the Client export and ImportAns64 What is local client copy and how to do and when it requiredAns65 How to check database performance through SAP and how to take initiatives to correct thatAns66 Questions from oracle database Architecture to backup recoveryAns67 Tell some common commands to use in UNIX

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 14: questions

Ans68 How to check the environment variable in UNIXAns69 In which case you need the remote client copyAns70 How to analyze the ST03 work load monitor and different details for the transaction being slowAns71 Tell about your system landscapeAns72 Oracle Questions A Oracle ArchitectureB Startup processC Shutdown abortD Installation of Oracle on UNIXE Password got lock or expired and how to analyze that password got lockedF Backup ProcessG

73 Which version of SAP you are workingAns74 Have you worked on XI or BIAns75 Have you any question to askAns76 How to check environment variable in UNIXAns77 Where all the parameter resides of SAP in oracle parameter file internally at OS level Means where we set the parameter in SAP ie how database communicates through the SAP system

Ans ndash sap work processes send request thru listner after that db work processes will get startedlike smon pmon Archn then db instance will start using OS level authentication for oracle using OPS$ Mechanism For the database the SAP System is a single user SAPR3 SAPltSAPSIDgt whose password is stored in the table SAPUSER Therefore to access the database the SAP System uses a mechanism called the OPS$ mechanism which works as follows a When the system accesses the database it first logs on to the database as the user OPS$ltoperating_system_usergt for example OPS$ltSAPSIDgtadm (The OPS$ user that corresponds to the operating system user must be defined in the database and identified as externally) b It retrieves the password for SAPR3from the SAPUSER table c It then logs on to the database as the user SAPR3

78 How to change the environment variableAns79 What are the types of transport Route and describe itAns80 Parent role and child roleAns81 Client copy profilesAns82 Difference bw 000 001 and 066

Clients 000 001 and 066 are standard clients that are pre-delivered by SAP These clients are not supposed to be used in development quality and production environments

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 15: questions

Client 000 is basically used as working client only when you do support pack upgrade or ABAP load generations (SGEN) and implementing additional languages etc Otherwise client 000 should not be used as a working client The same applies to client 001 But the only exception with 001 is with Solution Manager 001 will be your working client You will do all configurations and obtain support from SAP through this client With other Systems like BW and CRM this client (001) will not be a working client Two standard users (SAP and DDIC) are defined in the clients 000 and 001The client 066 is used only for EarlyWatch functions (Monitoring and performance) The user EarlyWatch is delivered in client 066 and is protected using the password SUPPORT This password needs to be changed for security purposes

Client 000 contains a simple Organizational structure of a test company and includes parameters for all applications standard settings configurations for the control of standard transactions and examples to be used in many different profiles of the business applications For these reasons 000 is a special client for the R3 system because it contains the client-independent settings Client 001 is a copy of the 000 client including the test company if this client is configured or customized its settings are client dependent It does not behave like 000 It is reserved for the activities of preparing a system for the production environment SAP customers usually use this client as a source for copying other new clients Client 066 is reserved for SAP access to its customers systems to perform

83 for local client copy which client we need to use why not 000 or 001Ans84 What client differenceAns85 What are changes for different clientsAns86 What is transactional RFCAns

Synchronous RFC

The first version of RFC is synchronous RFC (sRFC) This type of RFC executes the function call based on Synchronous communication meaning that the systems involved must both be available at the time the call is made

Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Transactional RFC(tRFC previously known as asynchronous RFC) is an asynchronous communication method that executes the called function module just once in the RFC server The remote system need not be available at the time when the RFC client program is executing a tRFC The tRFC component stores the called RFC function together with the corresponding data in the SAP database under a unique transaction ID (TID)

If a call is sent and the receiving system is down the call remains in the local queue The calling dialog program can proceed without waiting to see whether the remote call was successful If the receiving system does not become active within a certain amount of time the call is scheduled to run in batch

tRFC is always used if a function is executed as a Logical Unit of Work (LUW) Within a LUW all calls

1 are executed in the order in which they are called

2 are executed in the same program context in the target system

3 run as a single transaction they are either committed or rolled back as a unit

Implementation of tRFC is recommended if you want to maintain the transactional sequence of the calls

Disadvantages of tRFC

1 tRFC processes all LUWs independently of one another Due to the amount of activated tRFC processes this procedure can reduce performance significantly in both the send and the target systems

2 In addition the sequence of LUWs defined in the application cannot be kept It is therefore impossible to guarantee that the transactions will be executed in the sequence dictated by the application The only thing that can be guaranteed is that all LUWs are transferred sooner or later

Queued RFC (qRFC)

To guarantee that multiple LUWs are processed in the order specified by the application tRFC can be serialized using queues (inbound and outbound queues) This type of RFC is called queued RFC (qRFC)

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 16: questions

qRFC is therefore an extension of tRFC It transfers an LUW (transaction) only if it has no predecessors (based on the sequence defined in different application programs) in the participating queues

Implementation of qRFC is recommended if you want to guarantee that several transactions are processed in a predefined order

87 R3trans ndashdAns88 How to do mass user lockAns89 differences between client copy and client transportAns90 What is DPMONAns91 How to do performance related work in SAP ndash ST05Ans92 What is CHARM and how it works and its configurationAns93 Profiles for client copyAns

Copy profile DescriptionSAP_USER Users user roles and authorization profiles are copied

The client is not resetSAP_UONL User without authorization profile and role SAP_PROF Only authorization profile and rolesSAP_CUST Client-specific customizing including authorization

profile is copied The application data is deleted the user data is retained

SAP_CUSV SAP_CUST with variants SAP_UCUS SAP_CUST with user master dataSAP_UCSV SAP_UCUS with variants SAP_ALL All client data except change documents (see note

180949) and local data is copiedSAP_APPL SAP_ALL without user master data SAP_AAPX SAP_ALL without authorization profile and roles

94 Setting for client copyAns 95 Tablespace is full what to do nowAns Either add new data file or increase the size of the existing datafiles96 Job name to delete spool job and background jobAns

Job Name ABAP Program

VariantRecommendedRepeat Interval

Purpose

SAP_REORG_JOBS RSBTCDEL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old background jobs

SAP_REORG_SPOOL RSPO0041 Required you must create a

Daily Delete old spool requests

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 17: questions

variant

SAP_REORG_BATCHINPUT

This job may not run at the same time as normal batch input activity Schedule this job for periods during which no batch input sessions are run

RSBDCREO Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old batch input sessions

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

RSSNAPDL deletes old dumps To save the trouble of scheduling this job you can run the ABAP report RSNAPJOB from the ABAP editor This report schedules RSSNAPDL with the following specifications

Job name RSSNAPDLVariant name DEFAULT (you must create this variant)Start time 0100 AMRepeat interval Daily

RSSNAPDL Required you must create a variant

Daily Delete old dumps produced by ABAP abnormal terminations

SAP_REORG_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPSTDE Required you must create a variant

Monthly Delete job statistics for jobs not run since the specified date (statistics no longer needed since job was a one-time occurrence or is no longer run)

SAP_REORG_UPDATERECORDS

You need to run this job ONLY

10487071048707If you have deactivated automatic deletion of update records after they have been processed By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_delete_after_execution or

1048707 If you have deactivated automatic deletion of incomplete update records (records partially created when an update header is created and saved but the generating transaction then ends abnormally) By default automatic deletion is activated This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvbreorg or

1048707 If you have deactivated processing of U2 update

RSM13002 None required

Daily Delete old completed update records (automatic delete deactivated) delete incomplete update records (automatic delete deactivated)

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 18: questions

components after the processing of the associated U1 updates This function is controlled by system profile parameter rdispvb_v2_start

For more information see Managing Updates

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_JOBSTATISTIC RSBPCOLL None required

Daily Generate runtime statistics for background jobs

SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR

This job was previously also called COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR Please schedule this job under the new name

RSCOLL00 schedules all of the reports that need to run for the performance monitor RSCOLL00 uses table TCOLL to determine what to run See the CCMS Guide for more information on setting up RSCOLL00

RSCOLL00 None required

Hourly Collect system performance statistics

97 What is LUWAns- The Open SQL statements INSERT UPDATE MODIFY and DELETE allow you to program database changes that extend over several dialog steps Even if you have not explicitly programmed a database commit the implicit database commit that occurs after a screen has been processed concludes the database LUWA logical unit consisting of dialog steps whose changes are written to the database in a single database LUW is called an SAP LUW Unlike a database LUW an SAP LUW can span several dialog steps and be executed using a series of different work processes If an SAP LUW contains database changes you should either write all of them or none at all to the database To ensure that this happens you must include a database commit when your transaction has ended successfully and a database rollback in case the program detects an error However since database changes from a database LUW cannot be reversed in a subsequent database LUW you must make all of the database changes for the SAP LUW in a single database LUW To maintain data integrity you must bundle all of you database changes in the final database LUW of the SAP LUW

98 Parameter files for SAP with Oracle databaseAns

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 19: questions

99 How to register a system in SMPAns 100 How to delete a clientAns Use SCC5 to delete a client

101 What will happen if you delete the row from SCC4 Can you still login to the clientAns- We cannot login to that client if the row is deleted from the SCC4 but that client detail still exist in the SAP system again we need to maintain that detail for login to that client

102 Users in SAPAns-

Type Purpose

Dialog Individual interactive system access

System Background processing and communication within a system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA)

Communication Dialog-free communication for external RFC calls

Service Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users

Reference General non-person related users that allows the assignment of additional identical authorizations such as for Internet users created with transaction SU01 No logon is possible

There are five types of users in sap

Dialog users (A)

A normal dialog user is used for all logon types by exactly one person This is used to logon using SAP GUI During a dialog logon the system checks for expiredinitial passwords The user can change his or her own password Multiple dialog logons are checked and if appropriate logged These users are used for carrying out normal transactions This is an interactive type of logon The initial multiple logons are 6 They are set according to companies policy

System Users (B)

These are non interactive users They are used for background processing and internal communication in the system (such as RFC users for ALE Workflow TMS and CUA) Their passwords cannot be changed by the end users

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 20: questions

Only the user administrator can change their passwords Multiple logon is permitted in these type of users Dialog logon is not possible for these type of users

Communication Users (C)

Used for dialog-free communication between systems It is not possible to use this type of user for a dialog logon Their passwords are valid for certain period of time so they expire The users have option to change their own passwords

Service User (S)

Dialog user available to a larger anonymous group of users The system does not check for expiredinitial passwords during logon Only the user administrator can change the passwords Generally highly restricted authorizations are given to this type of users

Reference User (L)

A reference user is like the service user a general non-person-related user Dialog logon is not possible with this kind of user A reference user is used only to assign additional authorizations To assign a reference user to a dialog user specify it when maintaining the dialog user on the Roles tab page

Dialog User System user Communication

UserService User Reference

User

Logon with SAPGUI possible Interactive

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Multiple logon permitted yes NA yes yes yes

PasswordExpires or initialized

NA NA Expires or initialized

----NA---

Password can be changed by End user User Administrator

103 In our DB server these files exists in 2 locations initPRDora

initPRDsapspfilePRDoralocation 1 oraclePRD102_64dbs andlocation2 oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

For the BRBACKUP and SMB backups it getting the initPRDora from this locationoraclePRD102_64dbsinitPRDoraSo whats the use of files in location oraclePRDsapbackupPRD

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)
Page 21: questions

Ans- In oracle initltSIDgtora is the profile file and spfileora is the system profile file These files are needed by oracle while startup These files will be usually available in the path $ORACLE_HOMEdbs (where $ORACLE_HOME=oralceltSIDgt102_64) These files are just like the profile files for SAP (available in the location usrsapltSIDgtSYSprofile)

While taking a backup a copy of these profiles will be taken in the backup stage directory This happens whenever a backup is scheduled using BRTools These are just copies and nothing to do with the oracle startupspfilePRDora = the parameters that Oracle uses

initPRDora = the old file that Oracle used in the past now BRTOOLS uses it to read Oracle parameters it gets created everytime you start any BRTOOL

initPRDsap = file that BRTOOLS uses for its functionnality Location 1 (oraclePRD102_64dbs) is default location for you parameter files in Oracle When you bring up your database unless you specify the location of your parameter file by default oracle will look for the parameter file in that location

The file which you are seeing under sapbackup directory is the backup copy of the file under location 1 but again thats the backup copy of the current file only if you have configured you backup with the location 2 as your backup destination ( as you know when you do database backup the parameter file is also backedup)

Otherwise its just a mannual copy done by someone else

You can find that out by checking the data stamp on the file and your backup log

104 Which parameter needs to change for open the session more than 6 in SAPAns- max 6 we can make it less that 6 with parameter rdispmax_alt_modes105

  • Synchronous RFC
  • Transactional RFC (tRFC)
  • Queued RFC (qRFC)